Viper
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ......................................7
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ......................................73
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...........................................115
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................197
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES ......................................................255
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE.......................................................273
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .........................................................315
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE .................................................321
10
INDEX..........................................................................327
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve-
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operat-
ing procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury
and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss impor-
tant information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front
corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside
the vehicle through the windshield. This number also
appears on the top surface of the right-hand side tunnel
frame rail near the center of the vehicle, the outboard
facing surface of the right-hand side B-Pillar frame rail, as
well as the Automobile Information Disclosure Label af-
fixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration,
and the title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ...............9
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ................9
▫ KeyFob...............................9
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ...........10
▫ General Information .....................12
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................12
▫ Replacement Key Fobs ...................13
▫ Customer Key Fob Programming ............13
▫ General Information .....................14
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM .........14
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................14
▫ To Arm The System ......................14
▫ To Disarm The System ....................15
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ....................16
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY .................17
▫ To Unlock The Doors .....................17
▫ To Lock The Doors.......................18
▫ To Unlatch The Liftgate ...................18
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ...................18
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........18
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement ..............19
▫ General Information .....................20
䡵 DOOR LOCKS ..........................21
▫ Power Door Locks ......................21
䡵 WINDOWS .............................23
▫ Power Windows ........................23
▫ Auto-Down Feature .....................23
▫ Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection ....24
2
▫ Reset Auto-Up .........................24
䡵 LIFTGATE .............................25
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........26
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .........26
▫ Important Safety Precautions ...............26
▫ Seat Belt Systems .......................27
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .........37
▫ Child Restraints ........................57
▫ Transporting Pets .......................66
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .....66
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................68
▫ Transporting Passengers ...................68
▫ Exhaust Gas ...........................68
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle .......................69
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .....................71
8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key
Fob and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
ignition feature.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has three operating
positions, which are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery.
Key Fob
The key fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry key fob
and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the key
fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1—OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: In the event that the FOB does not start the vehicle
(⬙FOB not Found⬙ message) use the FOB nose (furthest
point from key ring) and push the start button. FOB
replaces the finger.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob
Emergency Key Removal
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio and power outlets will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the manual
transmission into REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob from
the ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF
position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a factory-mated key fob, a Keyless Push
Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank with
an invalid key fob.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone tried to use an invalid key fob to
start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the system. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an autho-
rized dealer.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Fob Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the doors, liftgate, and
hood for unauthorized entry and the ignition for unauthor-
ized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting. It will
also sound the horn and flash the park lights, and taillights.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn off the horn
after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
(flashing lights) after 15 minutes, and then rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is in the OFF
position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Entering The Liftgate With The System Armed
NOTE: Using the key to open the liftgate while the vehicle
security alarm is armed will trigger the alarm.
Push the liftgate release button on the key fob twice to
allow access without triggering the alarm or having to
disarm the vehicle security alarm. Then, within 30 seconds,
open the liftgate by using the key cylinder or the liftgate
release switch located in the exterior liftgate handle.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF posi-
tion:
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button (re-
quires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
• The liftgate key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
Power Door Lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1—OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Electronic Immobilization System
The Electronic Immobilization system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights will turn on whenever a door is opened
or the liftgate is opened and the dimmer switch is not in the
defeat position.
The interior lights will turn on, remain on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds, and then fade to off if any of the
following occur:
• A door is opened using the outside door handle and
then closed.
• A door is unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob.
The interior lights will turn on, remain on for about four
seconds, and then fade to off if a door is opened using the
inside door handle.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme down-
ward position), unless the overhead map/reading lights
are turned on manually.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm
from distances up to approximately 66ft (20 m) using a
hand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice to unlock both doors and
the liftgate. The park lights and turn signal lights will flash
to acknowledge the signal, and the illuminated entry
system will turn on. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator will illuminate in the
instrument cluster when one or both doors are unlocked.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/Both Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature lets you program the lights to flash when the
doors are locked with the key fob. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Unlock On 1st Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Autolock
This vehicle is equipped with Autolock. If the vehicle is
unlocked while the key fob is outside the vehicle and the
door is not opened for 30 seconds, the car will relock.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock the
doors. The horn will chirp once, and the park lights and
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Liftgate
Push the liftgate button on the key fob two times within
five seconds to unlatch the liftgate. Push and hold the
liftgate release button while pulling up on the trunk/hatch
to open.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the key fob for at least one second
and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights
will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second
time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h)
or greater.
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
Emergency Key Release
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Separating Key Fob Case
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
• Do not touch the exhaust pipe sill covers when
entering or exiting your vehicle. They can be hot
enough to burn you. Observe the warning labels on
each door closure panel.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL, apply the parking brake, turn
the engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always cycle the ignition
to the OFF mode lock, and lock your vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be in-
jured seriously or fatally. Don’t leave the ignition in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each door trim panel. Use
this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle.
Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door
will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will
sound as a reminder to remove the key fob.
NOTE: The door unlock indicator will illuminate in the
instrument cluster when one or both doors are unlocked.
Automatic Door Locks
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). The auto door
lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer per written request of the customer. Please see your
authorized dealer.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The driver door is opened.
3. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Power Door Lock Switch
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
There are single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door window. The
window controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
The power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
Both power window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent, and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first
detent and hold to close the window manually.
• If the window detects an obstacle 10 times in a row, the
auto–up feature unlearns.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
Prior to opening, the liftgate can be unlocked by using the
key fob, the manual lock cylinder located on the rear panel
with use of the mechanical “emergency” key, or by activat-
ing either of the power door lock switches located on the
door trim panels.
To open the liftgate, push and hold the liftgate release
switch located under the right side of the rear tail panel
while lifting the liftgate in one fluid motion.
NOTE: The liftgate release switch will be ignored under
the following conditions:
• When vehicle speed is not 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• When all doors are locked (except for key fob liftgate
access). Refer to “Entering The Liftgate With The System
Armed” under “Vehicle Security Alarm System” for
additional information.
Liftgate Release Switch And Lock Cylinder
1 — Liftgate Release Switch
2 — Lock Cylinder
Pull Up On The Liftgate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
The liftgate ajar icon will illuminate in the instrument
cluster display when the liftgate is open.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. How-
ever, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it
may be necessary to assist the props when opening the
liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer ser-
vice contact information.
WARNING!
•
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat
protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it,
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death
or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat-
ing BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING! (Continued)
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Man-
agement feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is equipped
with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags
need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed to
activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It is
designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose seated
weight classifies them in a category other than a properly
seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even an
adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light (an
amber light located in the center of the instrument panel)
tells the driver and front passenger when the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator
Light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
not deploy during a collision.
NOTE: When the front passenger seat is empty or when
very light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is
NOT illuminated.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to activate or deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the
occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat
and for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a
category other than a properly seated adult. This could be
a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of
The Following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor lo-
cated in the front passenger seat
• Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an
amber light located in the center of the instrument panel
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located
beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on
the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCM communicates this infor-
mation to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether it should activate or deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. In order for the OCS to
operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger
to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright.
• Facing forward.
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor.
• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the seat
back in an upright position.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light
objects in it.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a child, includ-
ing a child seated in a forward-facing child restraint or
booster seat.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passen-
ger, including a child or small adult.
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Front Passenger
Air Bag Output
Front Passenger
Air Bag Status
Unoccupied
seat*
NOT ILLUMI-
NATED
DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags,
heavy briefcases,
and other rela-
tively light ob-
jects
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing child
restraint**
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Child, including
a child in a
forward-facing
child restraint or
booster seat*
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Front Passenger
Air Bag Output
Front Passenger
Air Bag Status
Small adult “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Properly seated
adult
NOT ILLUMI-
NATED
ACTIVATED
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD
System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger
seat and never install a child restraint system, including a
rear-facing child restraint, in this vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indi-
cator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light (an amber light located in the center of the
instrument panel) tells the driver and front passenger
when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deacti-
vated. The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision.
When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD
indicator light is NOT illuminated.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an
adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger
seat. The driver and adult passenger should verify that the
PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is
riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated
properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may
deactivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated
for most properly seated and restrained children in the
passenger seat and for most properly installed child re-
straint systems. However, under certain conditions, even
with a properly installed child restraint system, the PAD
Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even though the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can
occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest weight
necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator Light. NEVER
assume the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deacti-
vated unless the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
If The Pad Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult
Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat
and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger
may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to allow
the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated weight to
activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step
out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat,
such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers,
blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat,
with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or near the
floor, and with their back against the seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in
this seated position for two to three minutes after
restarting the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
• If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for
an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator
Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag will not deploy in the event of a collision.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be activated for a
lighter weight passenger, including a small adult (depend-
ing on size) who is seated in the passenger seat. This does
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or deactivated. If
the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in the front
passenger seat, have the passenger reposition his or her
body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s
Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the
most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in deactivation
or activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight
on the front passenger seat may result in deactivation of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious
injury or death. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in activation
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of
improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to
face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and
center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front pas-
senger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
The Air Bag Warning Light
will illuminate whenever
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the
air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not
come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
Not Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first
turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
• If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain de-
activated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that
you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS compo-
nents that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the seated
weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must
function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the
front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat
cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any
reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA
US LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover
and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Door-
Integrated Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs are located in the door trim below the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The SABICs deploy upward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out
of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with
enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where
the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
SABICs are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether
the deployment of the SABIC in a particular impact event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The
side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appro-
priate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the SABIC on the impact side of the vehicle during
impacts that require SABIC occupant protection. In side
impacts, the SABICs deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left side SABIC only and a right-side impact
deploys the right side SABIC only. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not SABICs should have
deployed.
SABICs will not deploy in all side collisions, including
some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions
that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment.
SABICs may deploy during angled or offset frontal colli-
sions where the front air bags deploy.
SABICs are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system.
SABICs deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to SABICs can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating SABIC. To get the best protection from the
SABICs, occupants must wear their seat belts prop-
erly and sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the
size of the child.
(Continued)
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The door
trim below the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should remain free
from any obstructions.
• SABICs need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the SABICs during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the SABICs alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The SABICs work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, SABICs won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have SABICs.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious to you, but they
will open during air bag deployment.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Occupant Classification System
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-
53.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type
Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the rear passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions about installing child restraints with seat belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child re-
straint, up to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Can the head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted
to tighten the seat belt against the belt path
of the child restraint?
No
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as possible to keep
the child as far from the advanced passenger air bag as
possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There is a tether strap anchor
located behind the child
tether access cover behind the passenger seat. To attach
a child restraint tether strap to the anchor:
1. Move the seat forward.
2. Move the seatback to its full forward position.
3. Remove the child tether access cover by prying either
side with a screwdriver or similar tool, as shown.
NOTE: While the child tether is in use, keep the access
cover in a safe place so that it can be replaced after use of
the child tether.
4. Pass the child restraint tether hook through either
opening in the seatback underneath the head restraint.
5. Attach the tether hook to the anchor loop.
Child Seat Tether Access Cover
Child Seat Tether Anchor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
6. Move the seat to its farthest rearward position. Apply
body pressure to the seat to be sure the seat adjusters
have latched.
7. Return the seatback to an upright position.
8. Remove slack from the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum
performance and maximum durability for your new SRT
Vehicle.
Despite modern technology and World Class manufactur-
ing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through
the first oil change interval.
Tether Attached
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
It is recommended for the operator to observe the follow-
ing driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in
period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
extended period of time.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears (1st to
3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually at
higher rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator
pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools,
or similar activities during the first 1500 miles (2414 km).
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval. Running the engine
with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe
engine damage.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if
they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor
condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled to
ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your autho-
rized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on
while driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor
mat upside down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an addi-
tional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts
and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................75
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror ................75
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................78
▫ Power Mirrors .........................78
▫ Vanity Mirror ..........................79
䡵 SEATS ................................79
▫ Manual Seats ..........................80
▫ Power Seats ...........................82
▫ Non-Adjustable Head Restraints ............83
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ...........84
䡵 LIGHTS ...............................86
▫ Headlight Switch .......................86
▫ Automatic Headlights ....................86
▫ Headlights On With Wipers ................86
▫ Headlight Time Delay ....................87
▫ Daytime Running Lights ..................87
▫ Lights-On Reminder .....................87
▫ Multifunction Lever .....................88
▫ Turn Signals ...........................88
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ..................88
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................89
▫ Interior Lights .........................89
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........90
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .................91
▫ Wiper Operation ........................91
▫ Mist Feature ...........................91
▫ Windshield Washers .....................92
▫ Headlights On With Wipers ................92
3
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN .................93
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS ....................93
▫ Adjustable Foot Rest .....................94
䡵 SPEED CONTROL ........................95
▫ To Activate ............................96
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ...................96
▫ To Deactivate ..........................96
▫ To Resume Speed .......................97
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .................97
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ..................98
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........98
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .100
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....100
▫ Programming A Rolling Code ..............100
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code ..........102
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .......103
▫ Using HomeLink .......................104
▫ Security..............................104
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ....................105
▫ General Information .....................105
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ............106
▫ Auxiliary Jumper Harness.................108
䡵 CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED .............109
䡵 STORAGE .............................110
▫ Glove Compartment .....................110
▫ Console Features .......................111
▫ Door Storage ..........................112
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ...............113
▫ Rear Window Defroster ..................113
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted on, and
only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
9-1-1 button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable
if your Uconnect Access service is active and you are
connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network.
Assist Calls
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting Roadside Assis-
tance, Vehicle Care and Uconnect Care. The 9-1-1 Button
connects you to emergency services to someone who can
help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re
driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for
roadside Assistance.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for
Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile fea-
tures.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system
initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call
connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the rearview
mirror or press the cancellation button on the touch screen.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle
to determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1
operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to speak
with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds
occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator
until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1
operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle im-
mediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is re-
quired for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
passenger side mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Controls
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vanity Mirror
A vanity mirror is on the passenger side sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
Manual Seats
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Seat Height Adjustment
The seat height adjustment lever is located on the outboard
side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat
height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat
height.
Seat Adjustment Bar
Height Adjustment Lever
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recliner Adjustment
The recliner lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, pull the
recliner lever upward, lean backward until the seat is in the
desired position, and release the lever. To return the seat to
its full upright position, lean forward, pull the recliner
lever upward and hold it until the seat returns to its full
upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the power seat
switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the
floor.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the power seat recliner switch forward or rearward,
the seatback will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Power Seat Switch
Power Seat Recliner Switch
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Non-Adjustable Head Restraints
The non-adjustable head restraints are form fitted into the
upper structure of the seatback and are designed to reduce
the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event
of a rear impact. The seatback should be properly adjusted
to an upright position where the head restraint is posi-
tioned as close as possible to the back of your head.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched
seatback could cause serious injury.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
1. Reach into the back side area of the driver’s front fender
to gain access to the hood release lever.
2. Pull the hood release lever rearward to release the hood
latches.
3. Lift the hood upward to the full forward position.
Hood Release Lever Location
Hood Release Lever
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The recommended lift point is to place the lifting
hand forward of one of the wiper arms and pull up. The
assist props will help raise and hold the hood to a normal
usage position.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
• Do not leave the hood open in areas where strong
gust of wind are likely. Such a place might be by the
side of the road where large trucks pass by. Strong
gusts of wind may damage the hood. Always close
the hood in such situations.
• To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Simply lower the hood until it is open
approximately 18 inches (46 cm) and then drop it.
This should secure both latches. If both latches did
not secure, a slight push effort in the same area used
for opening the hood (front of wiper arm) needs to be
applied to secure the latches. Never drive the vehicle
unless the hood is fully closed with both latches
engaged.
Opened Hood
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the op-
eration of the headlights, parking lights, instrument
panel lights, instrument panel light dimming and
interior lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition in the OFF
position. To turn the Automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to on.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
Headlight Switch
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the
ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
Daytime Running Lights
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever
the engine is running and the park brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driv-
ing.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Multifunction Lever
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the
OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were
switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
The Battery Protection also includes the glove compart-
ment light and the trunk light. To restore interior light
operation after automatic battery protection is enabled
(lights off), either place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating
the dimmer control upward with the parking lights or
headlights on will increase the brightness of the instrument
panel lights and ambient lighting.
Dimmer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Interior Light Control
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors
are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as
the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Interior Lights
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles
desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. There are four delay
settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval
from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum
of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent,
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper opera-
tion, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings
for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located
on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the first
detent and release. The wipers will cycle one time and
automatically shut off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the
second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper
will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is
released from this position.
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range,
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer
knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed
while in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle
approximately three times after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to on.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
The tilt release lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the left side of the steering column. To tilt the
column, simply pull the release lever rearward toward you
and then move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. When the column is in the desired position, push
the release lever forward to lock the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater
range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat
position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, and
clutch pedal to move toward or away from the driver to
provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the
steering column.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
NOTE:
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the
best possible seat/pedal position.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjust-
able pedal’s path.
Adjustable Foot Rest
This feature allows the driver to adjust the foot rest
forward or backward and to rotate it upward or downward
to allow for greater driving comfort.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust the pedal:
1. Adjust the seat and steering column to a comfortable
position.
2. Using a socket wrench, loosen the nut on the pedal.
3. Slide the pedal either forward or backward and rotate it
upward or downward as desired.
4. Tighten the nut, being careful not to over tighten it.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Adjustable Foot Rest
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
speed control buttons are pushed at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Speed Control.
The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster dis-
play will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the
ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light
will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, manually accelerating 10 mph (16 km/h) above the
set speed or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing
the set speed memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button, or turning the ignition
switch OFF, erases the set speed memory.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-
tings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is dependent on
the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings”
in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more infor-
mation. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the
selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: If the accelerated speed goes above 10 mph
(16 km/h) of the set speed, the Speed Control will deacti-
vate.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into ⬙PARK⬙
or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
The active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illus-
trate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path
based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicles 12 volt battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on the sunvisor, designate
the three different HomeLink channels. The HomeLink
indicator is located above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before
you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identi-
fied by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and
close the door. The name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button until the
light stops blinking). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step two and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you would like to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in
view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then
rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button, while
you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button
, proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com
for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 volt (13 amp) power
outlet that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
One power outlet is located on the center console to the
right of the shifter. Push down on the power outlet to
access the opening. Push down on it again to close. This
power outlet is powered when the ignition is in the ON or
ACC position.
The second power outlet is located between the seat backs
above the cup holders. This power outlet is connected
directly by the battery and powered at all times.
Front Power Outlet
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 watts
(13 amps) at 12 volts. If the 160 watt (13 amp) power rating
is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be
replaced.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Center Console Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Auxiliary Jumper Harness
The Viper is equipped with an auxiliary power jumper,
allowing an electronic device to be directly connected to
the vehicle without having to use the console power
outlets. Power to the device will be controlled by the
ignition switch.
NOTE: The electronic device must draw less than five
amps to prevent damage.
To install, remove the mirror cover by pulling straight
down and separating the cover pieces.
Connect the auxiliary port jumper into the unused connec-
tor taped to the wiring bundle. Connect the other end of
the auxiliary port jumper to the electronic device.
NOTE: The red wire in the bundle is the power wire and
will provide the positive 12 volts to the electronic device.
Mirror Cover Removal
Auxiliary Port Jumper
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Re-install the mirror cover and be sure to not pinch the
wires that go into the electronic device.
CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
There are two cupholders located in the rear of the center
console.
Mirror Cover Installation
Center Console Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
An glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel. Push in the electronic release button
to open the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment will lock with the door
locks unless the key fob is detected inside the vehicle.
Glove Compartment Electronic Release Button
Opened Glove Compartment
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Features
Console Cubby Bin — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the center
console rearward of the gear selector.
Cargo Net Storage — If Equipped
There is a cargo net storage area located between the driver
and passenger seat.
Center Console Cubby Bin Location
Cargo Net Storage Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Storage Bin — If Equipped
There is a storage bin located between the driver and
passenger seat. Pull up on the release lever to open the
storage bin.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas located in the lower
center area of the door panel.
Storage Bin Location
Door Panel Storage
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Push this button to turn on
the rear window defroster. An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after approxi-
mately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ...........117
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................118
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............119
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS.........119
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ...............120
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights .............127
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights..............134
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights..............135
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights ...............136
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........137
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Controls .........137
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages.........139
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Menu Items ...........................140
䡵 CYBERSECURITY ........................146
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................148
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate .................149
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen ...............149
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 8.4 NAV System Settings . .149
▫ SRT Performance Pages ..................163
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ........166
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED. . . .166
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......167
▫ Radio Operation........................168
䡵 RADIO ANTENNA ......................168
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . . .168
▫ General Information .....................168
4
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ....................169
▫ Overview ............................170
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ..........................176
▫ Operating Tips ........................177
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR ...............180
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .................................180
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................180
▫ Get Started ...........................180
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................182
▫ Radio ...............................183
▫ Media ...............................184
▫ Phone ...............................185
▫ Voice Text Reply .......................186
▫ Climate (8.4 NAV) ......................187
▫ Navigation (8.4 NAV) ....................188
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4 NAV) ................189
▫ Vehicle Health Alert ....................189
▫ Register (8.4 NAV) ......................190
▫ Mobile App (8.4 NAV) ...................191
▫ Voice Texting (8.4 NAV) ..................192
▫ Yelp (8.4 NAV).........................193
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4 NAV).............193
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ..............194
▫ Do Not Disturb ........................194
▫ General Information .....................195
▫ Additional
Information ...................195
116 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Passenger Air Bag 11 — Climate Controls
2 — Sound System Speaker 7 — Glove Compartment 12 — Dimmer Controls
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Uconnect System 13 — Headlight Switch
4 — Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop Button 9 — Uconnect System Hard Controls
5 — Glove Compartment Lock 10 — Switch Bank (Screen Off, Hazard
Switch, Back Button)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
118 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
3. Oil Pressure Gauge
• This gauge should always indicate some oil pressure
when the engine is running. A continuous high or low
reading under normal driving conditions may indicate
a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service
should be obtained from an authorized dealer.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driv-
ing, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
120 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
English
Metric
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunc-
tion or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immedi-
ate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
122 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 minutes, or until
the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related compo-
nent.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a prob-
lem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to im-
mediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-
gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indica-
tions corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immedi-
ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact
your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunc-
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
NOTE: Some external parameters (eg; outdoor tempera-
ture) may affect TPMS info on your instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain on un-
til fuel is added.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate
function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and stays on at
road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative.
The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal
as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The instrument cluster display consists of
the following:
• Tachometer
• MPH/KMH
Instrument Cluster Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
• Vehicle Information
• Fuel Economy
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Performance
• Diagnostics
• Hibernation
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus
(Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored
Messages, Screen Set Up).
Instrument Cluster Display Steering Wheel Controls
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access/select the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the right arrow button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to return
to the main menu from an info screen or sub-
menu item.
NOTE: Pushing any arrow will override the instrument
cluster display “pop up” messages and return you to the
menu screen.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Service Air Bag System
• ESC Status (ESC OFF, ESC ON, ESC SPORT, ESC
TRACK, RAIN MODE) — Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
• Oil Pressure Low
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
•
Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire Pressure Warnings
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Brake Wear
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Service Air Bag System
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Park Brake Engaged
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Tachometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Tachometer icon is highlighted. Push
and release the right arrow button to change the
display between full tachometer or tachometer
with digital speedometer.
MPH To km/h
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the MPH to km/h icon is highlighted. Push
and release the right arrow button to change the
display between MPH or km/h.
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted. Push
and release the right arrow button to display the
following information submenus:
Tire Pressure
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Tire
Pressure” is highlighted. Push and release the right arrow
button, and one of the following will be displayed:
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle icon is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
icon.
• If one or more tires have low pressure, the tire pressure
values in each corner of the icon with the pressure value
of the low tire displayed in a different color than the
other tire pressure value.
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Push and release the left arrow button to return to
the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” under
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Coolant Temperature
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Coolant Temperature” is highlighted. Push and release
the right arrow button, and the coolant temperature will be
displayed.
Oil Temperature
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Oil
Temperature” is highlighted. Push and release the right
arrow button, and the oil temperature will be displayed.
Engine Hours
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Engine Hours” is highlighted. Push and release the right
arrow button, and the engine hours will be displayed.
Intake Air Temp.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Intake Air Temp.” is highlighted. Push and release the
right arrow button, and the intake air temperature will be
displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Current Torque
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Current Torque” is highlighted. Push and release the right
arrow button, and the current torque will be displayed.
Current Power
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Current Power” is highlighted. Push and release the right
arrow button, and the current power will be displayed.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted and
the following will display:
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG Bar-
graph)
• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Trip A
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip A icon is highlighted. The Trip A
information will display the following:
• Distance
• Average Speed
• Elapsed Time
Hold the right arrow button to reset all the information.
TripB—IfEquipped
Push and release up or down arrow button until
the Trip B icon is highlighted. The Trip B infor-
mation will display the following:
• Distance
• Average Speed
• Elapsed Time
Hold the right arrow button to reset all the information.
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio display icon is highlighted. Push
and release the right arrow button to display the
active source.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted.
This feature shows the number of stored warning
messages. Pushing the right arrow button will
allow you to see what the stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
• None
• Compass
• Temperature
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Fuel
• Current Fuel
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Temperature
• Battery
• Coolant Temperature
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Temperature
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Fuel
• Current Fuel
• Trip A
• Trip B
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
• Elapsed Time
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Temperature
• Battery
• Coolant Temperature
• Right Arrow Button
Restore To Defaults
(Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
Push and release the right arrow button to confirm.
Digital Speed
• On
• Off
SRT Performance
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Features is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
SRT icon is highlighted. Push and release the right arrow
button, and 0–60 MPH Duration will be displayed. Push
and release the left and right arrow button to scroll
through the following information sub-menus:
0–60 Time
Push and release the left or right arrow button until the
last 0–60 MPH information is displayed.
Braking Distance
Push and release the left or right arrow button until the
last Braking Distance information is displayed.
1/4 Mile Elapsed Time
Push and release the left or right arrow button until the
last 1/4 Mile Top Speed & Duration information is dis-
played.
1/8 Mile Elapsed Time
Push and release the left or right arrow button until the
last 1/8 Mile Top Speed & Duration information is dis-
played.
G-Force Instant
Push and release the left or right arrow button until the
Current G-Forces are displayed.
G-Force Peak
Push and release the left or right arrow button until the
Peak G-Forces are displayed.
Diagnostic Codes
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Diagnostic Code icon is highlighted.
Push and release the right arrow button to
display any present diagnostic trouble codes
along with a brief definition.
Vehicle Hibernation
To Activate Hibernation Mode
1. Cycle the ignition switch to (ACC).
2. Select Hibernation mode within the instru-
ment cluster display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
3. Push the right arrow button on the steering wheel
controls for one second. Vehicle will countdown from
ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode.
NOTE: You may push the right arrow button on the
steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort
Hibernation Mode.
To Deactivate Hibernation Mode
1. Push the key fob unlock button to unlock the vehicle.
2. Push the Keyless Push Button Ignition to the ON/RUN
position.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
•
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
•
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of
unknown origin could possibly contain malicious soft-
ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase
the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
(Continued)
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING! (Continued)
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices - If
Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.
NOTE: Features can vary by vehicle, depending on vehicle
configuration.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen
And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument
panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 8.4 NAV System Settings
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows
you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off Options,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Set-
tings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press
the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the list of available settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection,
press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark ap-
pears showing that the setting has been selected.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages
(English / Français / Español)
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected.
Keyboard
NOTE:
When the “Keyboard” setting is selected, you may select from the list of keyboard options. Press the desired key-
board option and a check mark will appear next to the box.
Units US Metric
Touchscreen Beep
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Setting Name Selectable Options
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the in-
strument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
Set Time Hours +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
Show Time In Status Bar
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Safety & Driving Assistance — If Equipped
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Illumi-
nated On Approach
0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Flash Lights
With Lock
On Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
5 mph (8 km/h).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmis-
sion is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob
unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no mat-
ter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s
door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can
be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power
Delay — If
Equipped
0 sec 45 sec 5 minutes 10 minutes
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay +-
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped +-
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Paired Audio Sources List Of Paired Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Audio Sources” feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For fur-
ther information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
System Information System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SRT Performance Pages
To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen then select the “SRT Perfor-
mance Pages” App from the list. Press the up or down
buttons on the touchscreen to cycle through the list.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Perfor-
mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
CAUTION!
Check engine oil level at every fuel fill-up. Running an
engine with a low oil level can cause severe engine
damage. Engine oil level must be maintained within
the safe zone on the engine oil dipstick or severe
engine damage may occur. Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” for further information.
The SRT Performance Pages include the following:
• Home
• Timers
• G-Force
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
• Engine
• Options
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Timers
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to select
from following “Tickets”:
• Current
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time” sum-
mary of performance timers.
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run of
performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
• Save
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run
for Uconnect System storage. The operation of the Save
feature is listed below:
With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB” button to
save runs to the jump drive.
With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
runs to the SD Card.
Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the Owner
web page.
Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer “Ticket.”
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ Mile
(200 meters).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter) mph
Displays the speed it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ Mile
(200 meters).
• ¼ mile (400 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
(400 meters).
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ¼ mile (400 meter) mph
Displays the speed it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
(400 meters).
Brake Distance
• Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
stop. Contains current and last data for distance and
start – from speed.
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Brake from mph
• Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE: Brake distance and speed timers will only display
⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 MPH
(48 km/h).
G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values
(two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as steering angle.
When a G-Force greater than zero is measured, the display
will update the value real-time.
Gauges 1
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Gauges 2
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Intake Air Temperature
Displays the actual intake air temperature.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Speed (mph)
Displays the actual speed.
• Horsepower (hp)
Displays the actual horsepower.
• Torque (ft-lb)
Displays the actual torque.
• Oil Pressure (psi)
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Options
When selected, this screen allows you to set your SRT
home page picture, and configure the vehicle color shown
in the G-Force screen.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
SD Card Slot, AUX Jack, And USB Port
1 — SD Card Slot
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB Port
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Located at the rear area of the center console, this feature
allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into
the USB port.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or other valid audio source.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control will
tune to the next pre-set station that you have programmed
in the radio pre-set buttons.
RADIO ANTENNA
The am/fm radio antenna is located in the windshield.
The Satellite/Navigation antenna is located in the rear
liftgate, while the cellular phone antenna is on the wind-
shield behind the interior rearview mirror.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or
off during mobile device operation when not using
Uconnect (if equipped).
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Overview
8.4 NAV Temperature Controls
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Per-
forming this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Icon Description
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi-
mum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon Description
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to
manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the face-
plate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
Driver Temperature Up And Down Button
Provides the driver with temperature control. Push the up button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards
the red arrow for warmer temperature settings. Push the down button on the faceplate for
cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button
towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger tem-
perature control buttons. Once the desired temperature
is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea-
ture. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in this section of the
manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the pres-
ence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service your A/C
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
3. The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4 NAV
system.
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Main Menu
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect
system with your voice.
Voice Recognition (VR)/Phone Buttons
1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote CD
player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Media
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Phone
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have compatible
mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Climate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
Navigation (8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the
beep, say:
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect Access (8.4 NAV)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the “Apps” button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on
the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
***Extra charges apply.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Register (8.4 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your ve-
hicle and handle all of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Assist Button
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mobile App (8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and sending a destination from your phone to your
vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Access Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your Uconnect Access ser-
vices, download the Uconnect Access app to your mo-
bile device. Use your Owner Account login and pass-
word to open the app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send ‘n Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of
the app to bring up app settings.
Mobile App
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Voice Texting (8.4 NAV)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say the following command: “Send message to
John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message
you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process
your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with
your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text
messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if your
vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
•
The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illumi-
nated to use the feature.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yelp (8.4 NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
push the VR button
, then say: “YELP search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like Uconnect
to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Dis-
tance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system.
Yelp
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set
reminders, and more. For further information go to the
Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes-
sage, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
SiriusXM Travel Link
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
Additional Information
©
2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Con-
nect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark
of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst
and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-
855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.caor call: 1-800-
465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES .................200
▫ Normal Starting ........................200
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................201
▫ After Starting..........................202
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ................202
▫ Shifting ..............................203
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ...............205
▫ Skip Shift Indicator Light .................205
䡵 STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED........206
䡵 LAUNCH MODE ........................206
䡵 TRACK USE............................208
▫ Guidelines For Track Use .................208
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ..........209
▫ Acceleration...........................209
▫ Traction .............................209
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER ..............209
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ...................210
▫ Shallow Standing Water ..................210
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................211
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ...............212
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................212
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................214
▫ Brake Pad Break-In .....................214
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM .....215
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System ..................215
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) .............217
▫ Electr
onic Stability Control ................217
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION ..............221
5
▫ Tire Markings .........................221
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............224
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ...........225
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ............226
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .........231
▫ Tire Pressure ..........................231
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ..................232
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation .....233
▫ Radial Ply Tires ........................233
▫ Tire Types ............................234
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped ..............234
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................235
▫ Tire Spinning .........................237
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ...................237
▫ Life Of Tire ...........................238
▫ Replacement Tires ......................238
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .........239
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS ......240
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................240
▫ Treadwear ............................241
▫ Traction Grades ........................241
▫ Temperature Grades .....................241
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .242
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings.............................244
▫ Service TPMS Warning ...................245
▫ TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped...........245
▫ General
Information .....................246
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................246
▫ 8.4L Engine ...........................246
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................247
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............247
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.........247
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......248
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ MMT In Gasoline.......................248
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................248
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................249
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............249
䡵 ADDING FUEL .........................250
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ..........251
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................254
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................254
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels
On The Ground) .......................254
䡵 GROUND CLEARANCE ..................254
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct any other occupant to buckle their seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unat-
tended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Long periods of engine idling, especially at higher
than normal engine idle speeds, can cause excessive
exhaust temperatures, which can damage your ve-
hicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running.
• Running an engine with a low oil level can cause
severe damage. Check the engine oil level at every
fuel fill-up.
Normal Starting
CAUTION!
The engine in your vehicle is designed for operation
down to 0°F (-18°C). Starting the engine below 0°F
(-18°C) coolant temperature creates a potential for
scuffing or seizing of internal components in this high
performance engine. To prevent engine damage, do not
start the engine at temperatures below 0°F (-18°C).
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• You must disarm the security system in order to start the
engine. Refer to “Security Alarm System” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
• Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
However, if the engine has not started within three
seconds, slightly press the accelerator pedal while con-
tinuing to crank. If the engine fails to start within 15
seconds, wait five seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
To Start The Engine:
1. Fully apply the parking brake.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor.
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
3. Place the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
4. Push the red ENGINE START/STOP button located on
the instrument panel. Release the button when the
engine starts.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con-
verter and once the engine has started, ignite and
(Continued)
Engine START/STOP Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
WARNING! (Continued)
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has
a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous
if done improperly, so follow this procedure care-
fully. Refer to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
enough power to continue running when the ENGINE
START button is released. If this occurs, continue cranking
up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the
way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the
ENGINE START button once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second
periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the
floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged and the gear
selector placed into REVERSE before leaving the vehicle,
especially when parked on an incline.
Your vehicle is equipped with a high torque capacity dual
disc clutch. The clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the
floor during each shift. As you release the clutch pedal,
lightly press the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
(Continued)
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not rest your hand on the gear selector while
driving, as this may result in transmission damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage
to the transmission may occur.
Ensure the transmission is in first gear when moving
forward from a standing position.
CAUTION!
Failure to start out in first gear when moving forward
from a starting position may result in damage to the
clutch.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage to
the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not fully
press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal
when shifting.
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the gear selector near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are
shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second or
downshifting from sixth to fifth.
The spring will try to pull the gear selector toward third
and fourth gear. Make sure you move the gear selector into
second or fifth gear. If you let the gear selector move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first to
fourth or from sixth to third gear.
Shift Pattern
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
You will find it easier to use only the lower gears for most
city driving. For steady highway driving with light accel-
erations, sixth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
you may notice light shift efforts into REVERSE with the
ignition in the ON position, and increased shift efforts
into REVERSE with the ignition in the OFF position.
This is normal operation of the transmission reverse
inhibitor system.
• Shifting gears during cold weather may require an
increased effort until the transmission lubricant is warm.
This is normal and not harmful to the transmission.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
a certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the
vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged
(clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when
driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when the
transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is not an
indication of a problem with your clutch or transmis-
sion.
• You must always use first gear (or REVERSE) when
starting from a standing position.
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop
before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so may
result in transmission damage.
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it
should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during cruise
conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in in-
creased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
1-4 4-5 5-6
mph 17 45 50
(km/h) (27) (72) (80)
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
Skip Shift Indicator Light
There are times when you must shift the trans-
mission directly from first gear into fourth gear
instead of from first gear into second gear. This is
to help you get the best possible fuel economy
from your vehicle. This occurs when engine coolant is
higher than 107°F (42°C), and vehicle speed is greater than
16 mph (26 km/h) but less than 18 mph (29 km/h), and
engine speed is less than 1,550 RPM, and the transmission
is in first gear, and the accelerator is at 20% throttle or less.
The “Skip Shift Indicator Light” located in the tachometer
will illuminate during these times.
When the “Skip Shift Indicator Light” illuminates, the shift
mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear to fourth
gear. After you shift the transmission into fourth gear, you
can press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear.
Downshifting - Proper downshifting will improve fuel
economy and prolong engine life.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downshift
to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade.
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or
downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with a two mode electronic
controlled damping system. This system allows for a
compliant street suspension damping setting or a firmer
race suspension damping setting. When in street mode the
system will automatically shift the suspension dampers to
the firmer Race damping setting during some hard accel-
eration and braking situations. There are two modes of
operation:
• Street Mode — This mode will give a sporty, but
comfortable ride. This mode is driver selectable when
the vehicle is placed in STREET mode (push the
“STREET” button on the Instrument Panel). This mode
is intended for a smoother ride on the various types of
pavement and road conditions while still providing
damping levels appropriate extreme capabilities.
• Race Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the
vehicle is placed in RACE mode (push the “RACE”
button on the Instrument Panel). This mode is for track
use only and will supply maximum grip to the tires.
NOTE:
• With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the suspen-
sion damping system will be in the last mode the system
was in when the vehicle was turned off. The driver can
select either Street or Race damping mode at any time.
• The suspension mode will lock and stay in whatever the
driver selects even when the ignition is turned off and
the car restarted.
• The RACE setting will provide a much firmer ride.
• When RACE mode is enabled, a Shock symbol with
“RACE” next to it will light up in the instrument cluster.
LAUNCH MODE
This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight
line racing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on a level track
surface with the engine running.
2. Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving.
3. Fully depress the clutch and select the first gear posi-
tion.
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Push and release the “LAUNCH” button (located on the
steering wheel controls).
5. Rapidly press the accelerator pedal to the floor within
one second.
NOTE: If the instrument cluster message indicates all
conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is pressed
to the floor quickly (within approximately 1/2 second) the
system will hold the engine speed to a preset speed (below
the engine rev limiter speed).
6. Release the clutch aggressively. Do not ride the clutch.
Release the accelerator pedal to deactivate launch control.
Pushing the launch control button or actuating the brakes
will also deactivate launch control.
NOTE:
• Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum launch
RPM and waits for the driver to release the clutch.
Launch Mode then uses engine throttle only to achieve
controlled wheelslip for maximum acceleration through
first gear.
• Launch Mode can be used in any of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) Modes.
• Launch Mode should not be used within the first 500
miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be used
in a controlled environment, and within the limits of
the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by
(Continued)
LAUNCH Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
WARNING! (Continued)
the performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
TRACK USE
Guidelines For Track Use
NOTE: Because of the extreme conditions encountered
during track use, any damage or wear associated with
track use is not covered by warranty.
• It is recommended that the shocks be operated in RACE
mode, if equipped.
• ESC is track capable in all modes.
Prior To Each Track Event/Day
• Verify all fluids are at the correct levels. Refer to “Fluid
Capacities” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• Verify the front and rear brake pads have more than ½
pad thickness remaining. If the brake pads require
changing, please burnish prior to track outing at full
pace.
• Tire pressure:
– 35psi hot recommended. This typically can be
achieved with cold pressures between 25 and 29 psi,
depending on driver, track, and ambient conditions.
Conclusion Of Each Track Event
• It is recommended that a brake bleed procedure is
performed to maintain the pedal feel and stopping
capability of your brake system.
• It is recommended that each track outing should end
with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal
braking.
• Following each track session, tires should be inspected
for wear.
NOTE:
• All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of endur-
ance, however, it is recommended that suspension sys-
tem, brake system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft boots should
be checked for wear or damage after every track event.
• Track usage results in increased operating temperatures
of the engine, transmission, clutch, driveline and brake
system. This may affect noise (NVH) countermeasures
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
designed into your vehicle. New components may need
to be installed to return the system to the original NVH
performance.
For ACR models, please review the supplemental manual
for track tips.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have
a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever
there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud,
loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
CAUTION!
Driving your vehicle through deep puddles at speeds
over 5 mph (8 km/h), may cause water to be ingested
into the engine. This can cause severe engine damage.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
(Continued)
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should be checked at
every oil change if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake Lever
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure you fully apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
REVERSE. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
As an added precaution when parking the vehicle, turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade.
To apply the parking brake, grasp the handle and pull it
rearward until you feel resistance. To release the parking
brake, grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pushing
the button on the end of the handle. When the button drops
into the handle (releasing the lock), guide the handle
downward to its stop and then release the button and the
handle.
The “Brake System Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will turn on when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the parking brake is applied.
NOTE:
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied
or a brake/ABS system fault. It does not show the
degree of brake application. If the “Brake System Warn-
ing Light” is illuminated when the parking brake is not
applied, please see your authorized dealer.
• Each time the parking brake is applied, the instrument
cluster will automatically go to the highest illumination
setting regardless of the dimmer control setting.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be injured seri-
ously or fatally. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children),
and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Ensure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake failure,
and an accident.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
Brake Pad Break-In
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance
braking system. The brake pads are a semi-metallic com-
pound, which offer superior fade resistance for consistent
operation. A compromise to using this type of brake pad is
that the brakes may squeal slightly under certain weather
and operating conditions (.i.e., during light brake applica-
tions).
The brakes on your new vehicle do not require a long
break-in period. However, you should avoid repeated hard
brake applications from high speeds during initial break-
in. In addition, you should avoid severe brake loading,
such as may be encountered when descending long moun-
tain grades.
For ACR models, please review the supplemental manual
for CCM brake pad and rotor burnishing.
Safe Operating Tips
WARNING!
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely, follow
these tips:
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis-
tances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated brak-
ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission whenever possible.
(Continued)
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, brak-
ing ability, and control.
• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at
very slow speeds.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), and Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC). All of these systems work
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various
driving conditions.
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse brak-
ing conditions. The system operates with a separate com-
puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel
lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sen-
sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This is
normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at approximately
12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the
brake pedal while this test is occurring, you may feel a
slight pedal movement. The movement can be more appar-
ent on ice and snow and be considered normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophis-
ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This in-
terference can cause possible loss of anti-lock brak-
ing capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering effi-
ciency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by
improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type
as the original equipment and the tires must be properly
inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or underinflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
and stay on briefly as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on. If the light does not turn
on during starting, have it repaired promptly.
This light also illuminates at vehicle start-up to indicate
that the ABS self-check is in process. If the light remains on
after start-up, or turns on and remains on at road speeds, it
may indicate a system malfunction or that the system is
inoperative. In this case, the system reverts to standard
non-anti-lock brakes. If this occurs, safely bring the vehicle
to a complete stop as soon as possible and cycle the ignition
to attempt to reset the ABS. If the light remains on, see your
authorized dealer immediately to have the system ser-
viced. Also, if the “BRAKE Warning Light” and the “ABS
Warning Light” are on, and the parking brake is fully
released, see your authorized dealer immediately.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
Electronic Stability Control
In full on mode the TCS system enhances directional
control and stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. The ESC corrects for oversteering and under-
steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropri-
ate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist in
counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
In full on mode ESC utilizes sensors in the vehicle to
determine the path that the driver intends to steer the
vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer – when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer – when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents re-
sulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropri-
ate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Operating Modes
The ESC system may have five available operating modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC system.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. The ESC On mode should be used for most
driving situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
ESC Button
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Full Off
The ESC Off mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public roadways.
In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the
“ESC” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped
with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
sound, the “ESC OFF” telltale will illuminate, and the “ESC
OFF” will display in the vehicle cluster (left of the odom-
eter). The “ESC OFF” message may appear in the instru-
ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily push the
“ESC” switch.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
only.
Sport Mode — If Equipped
Sport mode has reduced traction control and reduced
stability control. To enter the “Sport Mode” mode, push the
“ESC” switch once (located on the steering wheel). The
“ESC OFF” telltale will illuminate, and the “ESC SPORT”
will display in the vehicle cluster (left of the odometer).
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
When in Sport Mode, the TCS functionality of ESC,
(except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section), has been disabled, the “ESC Sport Light”
will illuminate, and the “ESC SPORT” message will
display in the vehicle cluster. When in Sport Mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is reduced.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Track Mode — If Equipped
Track Mode has no traction control and has reduced
stability control. To enter the “Track Mode” mode, push the
“ESC” switch twice. The “ESC OFF” telltale will illuminate,
and the “ESC TRACK” message will display in the vehicle
cluster (left of the odometer). Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING!
When in Track Mode, the TCS functionality of ESC,
(except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section), has been disabled, the “ESC Track Light”
will illuminate, and the “ESC TRACK” message will
display in the vehicle cluster. When in Track Mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is greatly reduced. Track Mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road only.
Rain Mode
Rain mode offers increased traction control and stability
control for low traction conditions such as wet roads, dry
roads during cold temperatures, or when the driver wants
enhanced stability due to lack of familiarity or experience
with the vehicle’s response. To enter the “Rain Mode”
mode, push the “ESC” switch three times. The “ESC Rain
Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC RAIN” message will
display in the vehicle cluster (left of the odometer). Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Some models may not offer “Sport” or “Track”
Mode.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its
load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under speci-
fied operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed
limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
(Continued)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions. Under-inflation increases tire flex-
ing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure. Unequal tire
pressures can cause steering problems. You could
lose control of your vehicle. Over-inflated or under-
inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Always
drive with each tire inflated to the recommended
cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”,
or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Own-
er’s Information kit.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in
“Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supple-
ment located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer tow-
ing.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
There are no snow tires that are compatible with the wheels
on this vehicle.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section
located in your Owner’s Information kit for further infor-
mation.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep in-
flated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
ponents. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are
not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance interval. Remember, more frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing
rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation.
NOTE: Each wheel on your vehicle contains a tire pressure
sensor. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) learns
the location of each sensor though system programming.
Although not required, the manufacturer recommends
reprogramming the TPMS after rotating the tires so that the
system can relearn each sensor’s location. See your autho-
rized dealer for system reprogramming.
The front and rear tires are different sizes and cannot be
used in place of each other. Rotate the tires “side-to-side”
as shown in the diagram.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in
each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your
vehicle.
Tire Rotation
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Ex-
cessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module. It is particularly important
for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your
vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The
TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module.
• Four TPM sensors.
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the instru-
ment cluster.
• TPM Telltale Light.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illumi-
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale
Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and
the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30
psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPM Telltale Light
will still be ON. In this situation, the TPM Telltale Light
will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙LOW
TIRE⬙ message and a graphic showing the pressure values
of each tire with the low tire pressure values changing
color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a
different color in the instrument cluster display graphic) to
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the instru-
ment cluster will change color back to the original color,
and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash,
and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains ma-
terials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assem-
blies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your ve-
hicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPM
telltale and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
in the instrument cluster display but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off, and the instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message. The instrument cluster will also
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
8.4L Engine
The 8.4L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations, provide optimal
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Pre-
mium” gasoline having a posted octane
number of 91 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is
required for in this engine.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immedi-
ately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 10% ethanol (E-10). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emis-
sions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please ob-
serve pump labels as they should clearly communicate if
a fuel contains greater than 10% ethanol (E-10).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 10% ethanol (E-10) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol (E-10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available, the
usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com
for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door
using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe
seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
turn on.
(Continued)
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release procedure by following the
proceeding steps.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Locate the carpet access door (on the right side inner
trim panel of the trunk).
Carpet Access Door
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
3. Pull the edge of the access door on the right side inner
trim panel to expose the emergency release cable.
4. Pull the release cable to release the fuel door.
Edge Of Access Door
Release Cable
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Return the release cable to the original position (inside
the inner trim panel) and push the carpet back into the
original position.
Fuel Door Open Carpet Into Original Position
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Manual Transmission
Flat Tow None NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
On Trailer All OK
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GROUND CLEARANCE
The front and rear fascias and side sills ride low and
ground clearance is limited.
CAUTION!
Damage to the front and rear fascias and side sills can
occur if you disregard the low ground clearance in
these areas of your vehicle. Pay close attention when
parking to avoid running into parking curbs. Exercise
caution when entering or exiting steep driveways, or
when pulling off the road onto soft shoulders.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER .............256
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............256
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .257
▫ Torque Specifications ....................257
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........258
▫ Description ...........................258
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage...................259
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .259
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ..........260
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........262
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ............267
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............270
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............270
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................271
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............271
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center
of the instrument panel above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down and use the highest
gear possible.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
• In city traffic — While moving, shift into the highest
gear possible to reduce engine RPM.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
256 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
107 Ft-Lbs (145 N·m) 1/2” x 20 19 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 257
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Torque Patterns
258 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the left side of the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug
(located on the bottom side of
the Tire Service Kit)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 259
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn
on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
260 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid inject-
ing sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
• If the tire has any sidewall damage.
• If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
• If the wheel has any damage.
• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
sources.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 261
WARNING! (Continued)
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the
OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
262 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve
stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning on the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the park-
ing brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning on the
Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 263
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit.
264 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to
Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 265
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle
(1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it
accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
266 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con-
verter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has
a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully.
• Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
NOTE: The battery is located underneath an access panel
inside the rear compartment on the left side of the vehicle.
A remote battery terminal is located in the engine compart-
ment for jump-starting.
Battery Location
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 267
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such
as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadver-
tent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle,
park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but without
allowing the vehicles to touch one another.
3. Set the parking brake, place the transmission in NEU-
TRAL, and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
5. Remove the plastic fuse cover to gain access to the
remote jump-start positive (+) post in the engine com-
partment. Refer to the following illustration for remote
jump-starting connections.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Remote Jump Start Connections
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
268 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
7. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
8. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
9. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
10. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
11. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 269
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn your steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then, shift back and forth between 1st gear and
REVERSE, while gently pushing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of pressure to maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck. And do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
1st gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Only use flatbed
equipment. Always comply with applicable state or local
towing ordinances.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
270 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) func-
tion.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 271
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L ...........275
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . . .276
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................276
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................277
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ...................278
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................278
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES .............279
▫ Engine Oil ...........................279
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................281
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................281
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................282
▫ Hibernation Mode ......................283
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............284
▫ Body Lubrication ......................285
▫ Wiper Blades .........................285
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................286
▫ Exhaust System ........................286
▫ Cooling System ........................288
▫ Brake System .........................292
▫ Manual Transmission ....................294
▫ Hydraulic Clutch ......................294
▫ Rear Axle ............................295
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion ........................295
䡵 FUSES ................................302
▫ Power Distribution Center ................302
䡵 VEHICLE
STORAGE .....................307
7
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS ...................309
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................310
▫ Front Headlamp, Front Park/
Turn Signal Lamp ......................310
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp .............310
▫ Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp .................310
▫ Rear Turn Signal Lamp ...................310
▫ Backup Lamps .........................310
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................311
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND
GENUINE PARTS .......................312
▫ Engine ..............................312
▫ Chassis .............................314
274 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir
2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 275
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
To meet new government regulations and promote cleaner
air, your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions and engine control systems.
When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle
will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as
well as engine emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light. It will also
store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although your ve-
hicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the light on could cause fur-
ther damage to the emission control system. It could
also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any state emissions tests can
be performed.
If the light is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
(Continued)
276 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect Cy-
berSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or
start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you
will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition
OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 277
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled main-
tenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
278 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an autho-
rized dealer or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
flush is needed because of component malfunction,
use only the specified fluid for the flushing proce-
dure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the oil level is approximately five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Check-
ing engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you
an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground also
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Add oil
only when the level is below the SAFE mark.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 279
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which-
ever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-12633.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
0W-40 or equivalent engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 8.4L
Use MOPAR SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
280 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-
tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 281
CAUTION!
Some aftermarket air cleaners and filters can cause
mass air flow sensor issues which can lead to a
driveability problem or a limp home condition.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is vented, and
must be replaced with a vented battery.
The battery is located underneath an access panel inside the
rear compartment on the left side of the vehicle. A remote
battery terminal is located in the engine compartment for
jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What
To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
To gain access to the battery, remove the floor portion of the
rear compartment carpet.
Battery Location
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact
your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery
when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on
skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of
water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Hibernation Mode
The Hibernation mode feature conserves battery power
when storing the vehicle. It allows for up to three months
of storage time without losing radio and engine controller
adaptive memory. Using this feature is an alternative to
disconnecting the battery.
NOTE: This vehicle is designed to sit in storage with a
fully charged battery for up to 30 days. If you plan to store
the vehicle longer than 30 days, we recommend doing one
of the following:
• Disconnect the battery.
• Use the battery charger.
• Put the vehicle into Hibernation mode (3-month charge).
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283
To Activate Hibernation Mode
1. Cycle the ignition switch to (ACC).
2. Select Hibernation mode within the instrument cluster
display.
3. Push the right arrow button on the steering wheel
controls for one second. Vehicle will countdown from
ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode.
NOTE: You may push the right arrow button on the
steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort
Hibernation Mode.
To Deactivate Hibernation Mode
1. Push the key fob UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicle.
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable
and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved re-
frigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information
Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty infor-
mation.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair
requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades, the windshield,
and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumu-
lations of salt, waxes, or road film, and help reduce
streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are not
frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines, or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir
at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not engine coolant (antifreeze) and operate
the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition switch to
the LOCK position. The fan is temperature con-
trolled and can start at any time the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser/radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face
of the condenser/radiator.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN
THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system, please contact your local autho-
rized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to insure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres-
sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
To ensure brake system performance, all brake system com-
ponents should be inspected periodically. Refer to “Mainte-
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perform-
ing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused
by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information. Use of a
brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or
unidentified as to specification, may result in sudden brake
failure during hard prolonged braking.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in an accident.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293
Change Brake Fluid
Brake fluid will tend to absorb moisture from the atmo-
sphere over time. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
water, brake performance will deteriorate. Therefore, the
brake fluid must be changed at the intervals specified in
the “Maintenance Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance
Schedule” for further information. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid in the transmission when performing other
underbody services.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug located on
the left side of the transmission. The fluid level should be
approximately 1/4 in (6.4 mm) below the bottom of the fill
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: DO NOT overfill transmission, damage can occur.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or damage to the trans-
mission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Change Transmission Fluid
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. If contaminated with water, change the
fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Hydraulic Clutch
Master Cylinder — Clutch Fluid Level Check
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume
of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir.
In the event of leakage or wear, use only the manufactur-
er’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubri-
cants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Axle
Axle Lubricant Level Check
Check the exterior of the axle for evidence of gear oil
leakage every 12 months or 6,000 miles (10 000 km). This
check should be made with the vehicle level and on the
ground or raised on an axle and wheel type hoist. The axle
lubricant level should be between the bottom of the filler
plug and a point approximately 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) below
the filler plug. If adding axle lubricant, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended axle lubricant. Refer to “Flu-
ids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Using axle fluid other than the manufactured recom-
mended fluid may cause a shudder/noise issue. refer to
“Fluids, Lubes, And Genuine Parts” in “ Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Lubricant
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. Change the lubricant immediately if con-
taminated with water. See your authorized dealer for
service.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
These products and automatic car washes may damage
the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment, Mopar Chrome
Cleaner, or their equivalent is recommended or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black
296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this
finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Leather Or Vinyl Seat/Trim Care And Cleaning
Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp
soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and
damage the leather surface and should be removed imme-
diately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed
easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equiva-
lent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking the leather with
any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
the leather. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft
cloth until all residue is removed.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Aero Group (Front Splitter) — If Equipped
The front splitter will not flex or compress against impacts
from the front. If an impact does occur, have the splitter
inspected. A cracked or delaminated splitter should be
replaced.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
Always leave ample room and be sure to educate anyone
you allow to operate the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Use care when approaching parking blocks, tall speed
bumps and garage curbs. These surfaces can damage
your splitter and fascia.
Use caution when driving up to sloped surfaces or over
speed bumps. Approaching a speed bump or a slope at a
slight angle may improve your clearance.
CAUTION!
• Hard contact with steep ramps may cause damage to
your splitter and fascia.
• Replace rub strips when they are worn down to 1/8
inch (3 mm) on the front edge. This will avoid
damage to the carbon fiber panel.
Refer to the ACR Owner’s Manual Supplement for infor-
mation specific to the ACR.
Front Splitter
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Wing — If Equipped
Do not operate the vehicle with the rear wing removed.
The aerodynamic balance of this set up is unstable and can
cause a loss of control.
Water may drain slowly from the ends of the wing after
washing or exposure to rain, this is normal. Opening the
liftgate will expedite drainage.
WARNING!
Use extra caution when closing the rear deck lid on a
vehicle equipped with a rear wing. Due to the added
weight of the rear wing the deck lid will close at a
higher rate of speed and can cause injury.
Carbon Fiber — If Equipped
The clear coated carbon fiber panels will have some
variation and minor waviness in the woven pattern. This is
inherent to the process and a sign of its authenticity.
All carbon fiber materials are susceptible to UV degrada-
tion during long exposure to the sun. The woven carbon
components use the latest technology in the resin system
and the clear coat. As with any automotive coating, storing
your vehicle in a covered location will guarantee a long
lasting finish.
The rear wing is molded with unidirectional carbon fiber
and painted in body color. Some patterned or linear
conditions may be visible in the painted carbon fiber
surfaces. This is also a normal result of the carbon fiber
process.
Rear Wing
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Power Distribution Center
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
3 — 40 Amp
Green
— Rad Fan
4 — 40 Amp
Green
— Rad Fan Rly High
5 — 40 Amp
Green
— ABS/ESP Pump Feed
6 — 40 Amp
Green
— Starter
7 — 40 Amp
Green
— CBC (Ext. Lighting #1)
8 — 40 Amp
Green
— CBC (Ext. Lighting #2)
9 — 30 Amp Pink — CBC (Lighting, Washer Pump)
10 — 30 Amp Pink — CBC (Power Lock)
11 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
12 — 25 Amp Clear — ABS/ESP Valve Feed
13 — — 20 Amp
Yellow
Horn
14 — — 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
15 — — 10 Amp Red Diagnostic, Fuel Door, Stop Switch
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
16 — — 15 Amp Blue KIN, RF Hub
17 — — 25 Amp cir-
cuit breaker
Power Seats
18 — 30 Amp Pink — Driver Door Mod
19 — 30 Amp Pink — Passenger Door Mod
20 — 30 Amp Pink — Rear Window Defroster
21 — 20 Amp Blue — Wiper
22 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
23 — — 15 Amp Blue HVAC MOD, Cluster, ICS-Switch Bank
24 — — 25 Amp Clear PCM-Powertrain Control Module
25 — — 25 Amp Clear Fuel Pump
26 — — 20 Amp
Yellow
ASD #1
27 — — 20 Amp
Yellow
ASD #2
28 — — — Not Used
29 — 40 Amp
Green
— HVAC Blower
30 — 20 Amp Blue — RR Power Outlet, Adj. Pedals, UCI
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
31 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
32 — — — Not Used
33 — 20 Amp Blue — Run Acc Relay
34 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
35 — — — Not Used
36 — — 10 Amp Red ORC Mod Run
37 — — 15 Amp Blue Cluster, Camera
38 — — 20 Amp
Yellow
Active Damping Suspension
39 — — 10 Amp Red HVAC Module, In Vehicle Temp, Blower Relay
40 — — — Not Used
41 G8VA — — Run/Start
42 G8VA — — Fuel Door
43AC (For-
ward Fuse)
— — 2 Amp Grey SCCM
43BE (Rear-
ward Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Module
44AC (For-
ward Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red Rear View Mirror, Aux Port Jumper
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
44BE (Rear-
ward Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red Intelligent Battery Sensor
45 — — 10 Amp Red PCM-Powertrain Control Module, Fuel Pump Relay
46 — — 10 Amp Red ESC Module, Stop Lamp Switch
47 — — 10 Amp Red ORC Module, Passenger Seat OCM
48 — — 10 Amp Red SCCM
49 — — 25 Amp Clear Amplifier
50 HC Micro — — Rad Fan
51 HC Micro — — Rad Fan Relay SER/PAR
52 HC Micro — — Starter Relay
53 HC Micro — — Rear Window Defroster Relay
54 HC Relay — — Rad Fan Relay High
55 HC Micro — — Wiper ON/OFF
56 HC Micro — — Wiper LO/HI
57 G8VA — — Horn Relay
58 G8VA — — A/C Clutch Relay
59 HC Micro — — HVAC Blower
60 HC Micro — — Fuel Pump
61 G8VA — — Run Relay #1
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
62 G8VA — — Run Relay #2
63 HC Micro — — ASD #1
64 HC Micro — — ASD #2
65 G8VA — — Run Accy #1, Pop Up, Driver Door Window Switch
66 — — — Not Used
NOTE: A 15 Amp fuse for the radio system is located
in-line at the battery positive terminal.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
We recommend that you follow these guidelines for storing
your vehicle for extended periods.
• Fill the fuel tank. This will prevent water condensation
inside the tank. If you plan to store your vehicle more
than two months, add an anti-oxidant fuel stabilizer to
the fuel tank.
• Change the oil to remove any corrosive combustion
related acids in the crankcase.
• Check that the radiator coolant level of protection is to at
least -20°F (-29°C).
• Make sure that all tires are inflated to the optimum
pressure.
• Wash and wax the vehicle to protect the finish.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
• Store the vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated location.
• Move the wiper blades away from the windshield.
• Block the wheels. Do not apply the parking brake.
• Cut blocks of plywood about the same size of the tires.
Cover each block with indoor/outdoor carpeting and
place them between the tires and concrete. This will
prevent tire flat spotting.
• For long-term storage, remove the tires and put the
vehicle up on blocks. Stack the tires on plywood and
cover with a tarp to prevent flat spotting.
• If the vehicle will be subjected to freezing temperatures,
either remove the battery and store it in a dry, well
ventilated area or connect a trickle charger (1.5 Amp)
with automatic shutdown / overcharge protection to the
battery. However, do not leave the trickle charger
hooked up to the battery without being plugged in to a
110 Volt AC outlet, as this will result in further drain on
the vehicle’s battery. If the vehicle is not going to be
driven in the next three weeks, perform the battery
recharge procedure in the Service Manual. Then, either
disconnect the battery at the negative terminal or use
“Hibernation Mode” to conserve battery power. Refer to
“Maintenance Procedures/Hibernation Mode” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Cover the vehicle whenever possible to prevent acciden-
tal damage to the finish.
NOTE: Disconnecting the battery causes the engine control
system to lose memory of some “learned” functions. After
reconnecting the battery, the engine may run rough until
the control module “relearns” these functions. Using the
Battery Save Feature will prevent the engine controller
from loosing its memory.
CAUTION!
Use care when disconnecting the remote positive cable.
It is connected to the battery and can short out to any
metal on the vehicle. Always tape or wrap the exposed
cable end to prevent electrical shorts.
Check the battery every four to six weeks to ensure that the
voltage is above 12.10 Volts. The voltage will drop more
rapidly in hot temperatures. If battery voltage drops below
12.10 Volts, follow the battery recharge procedure in the
Service Manual.
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To help prevent the battery from discharging dur-
ing shorter periods of inactivity, perform the following:
1. Make sure that the liftgate, hood, doors, windows are
completely closed.
2. Make sure that the key fob is operating and that the
battery is good.
3. Make sure that the HOOD, LIFTGATE, and DOOR
switches are in adjustment. Perform the quick system
check, which follows:
Use the key fob to set the alarm. If the alarm SET light
comes on and flashes, the system is operating properly. If
not, there is a problem with a switch or the system. See
your authorized dealer for service.
If you plan to store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we
recommend using Hibernation Mode to conserve battery
power. Refer to “Hibernation Mode” in Maintenance
Procedures for further information.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Message Center Indicators Serviced At Authorized Dealer
Cluster LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Gauge Pack Serviced At Authorized Dealer
Heater Control Serviced At Authorized Dealer
Interior Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Courtesy Foot Well Lights W3W
Cargo Lamp (Coupe Liftgate) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low/High Beam Headlamp HID (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker Lamp 2821M
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Marker Lamp 2821M
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
License Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Backup Lamps
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 16 Gallons 60.6 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
We recommend you use synthetic
SAE 0W-40, API Certified.
11 Quarts 10.4 Liters
Transmission
We recommend you use MOPAR
ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
3.4 Quarts 3.2 Liters
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Castrol SAF-
XJ/SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear and
Axle Lubricant.
1.5 Quarts 1.4 Liters
Cooling System *
We recommend you use MOPAR
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent).
16 Quarts 15 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use a full synthetic 0W-40 engine oil
such as MOPAR or Pennzoil Ultra or equivalent engine oil.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection We recommend you use Unleaded 91 Octane Only or
Higher, 0-10% Ethanol.
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Transmission We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid.
Rear Axle We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant.
Brake/Clutch Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR Brake and Clutch Fluid
DOT 4 Motor Vehicle.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid + 4,
MOPAR or ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual
must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect
your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle perfor-
mance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be
needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as
dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and
service should also be done anytime a malfunction is
suspected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent, and add if re-
quired.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering, and transmission, and
add as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
NOTE: Also, inspect the exhaust system if you notice a
change in the sound of the exhaust system, or if the exhaust
fumes can be detected inside the vehicle.
• Inspect the brake hoses.
• Inspect the suspension components.
316 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Lubricate door hinges and check springs.
• Check the engine coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Check power steering fluid level.
MAINTENANCE CHART
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and en-
gine oil filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings; replace
if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before scheduled mainte-
nance.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the exhaust system. XXXXXXXXXXXX
Change Brake Fluid. * XXXXXX
Adjust the parking brake on ve-
hicles equipped with four wheel
disc brakes.
XXXXX
Change the manual transmission
fluid.
XXXX
Inspect the manual transmission
fluid, add as necessary.
XX XX XX XX
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 317
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the rear axle fluid. XXXXXXXX
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and boot seals, for cracks
or leaks and all parts for damage,
wear, improper looseness or end
play; replace if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Replace the engine air cleaner. XXXXX
Inspect and replace the PCV
Valve if necessary.
X
Replace the spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 120 months if not done
at 150,000 miles (240,000 km).
XX
* The brake fluid change interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
monthly intervals do not apply.
318 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 319
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................322
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............322
▫ Prepare A List .........................322
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............322
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................322
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............323
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........323
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................323
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................323
▫ Service Contract .......................324
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............324
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................325
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............325
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .325
▫ In Canada ............................325
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............325
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the
right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
322 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (855) SRT–TEAM
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 323
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
324 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order
form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manu-
als (no P.O. Boxes).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 325
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
326 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes .........................214
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .................215
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............289
Adding Fuel ..............................250
Adding Washer Fluid........................286
Additives, Fuel ............................248
Adjust
Forward ................................82
Rearward ...............................82
Adjustable Pedals ...........................93
AirBag..................................39
Advance Front Air Bag .....................39
Air Bag Operation .........................41
Air Bag Warning Light ...................37, 42
Enhanced Accident Response ..............55, 271
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................271
FrontAirBag .........................39, 42
If A Deployment Occurs ....................54
Knee Impact Bolsters .......................51
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............55
Transporting Pets .........................66
Air Bag Light ........................37, 69, 120
Air Bag Maintenance .........................55
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......281
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................284
Air Conditioning Filter.......................178
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...............177
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...............284, 285
Air Conditioning System ..................176, 284
Air Pressure, Tires ..........................232
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................123
Alarm System (Security Alarm) .................14
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ................6
Antenna .................................168
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................288, 311
Capacities ..............................311
Disposal ...............................291
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................215
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................217
Appearance Care...........................295
Auto
Down Power Windows ...................23
Automatic Door Locks........................22
Automatic Headlights ........................86
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...........176
Auto Unlock, Doors .........................22
Auto Up Power Windows .....................24
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .........106
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................106
Battery...............................124, 282
328 INDEX
Charging System Light ....................124
Emergency Starting .......................267
Jump Starting ...........................267
Key Fob Battery Replacement .................19
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................19
Location ...............................282
Remote Battery Replacement .................19
Saving Feature (Protection) ..................283
Storing Vehicle ..........................283
Belts, Seat.................................69
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................285
B-Pillar Location ...........................226
Brake Control System, Electronic................215
Brake, Parking.............................212
Brake System ..........................214, 292
Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................214, 215
Fluid Check .........................292, 314
Master Cylinder .........................292
Warning Light ...........................121
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle..........214
Brightness, Interior Lights .....................89
Bulb Replacement ..........................310
Bulbs, Light ............................71, 309
Camera, Rear ..............................98
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........311
Capacities, Fluid ...........................311
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............................280
Power Steering ..........................212
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................290
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................68, 249
Car Washes...............................295
Chains, Tire ..............................239
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................222
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .277
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................68
Checks, Safety .............................68
Child Restraint .............................57
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................
60
Child Restraints ..........................57
Child Seat Installation ......................63
Infants And Child Restraints .................59
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........59
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ..............64
Clean Air Gasoline .........................247
Cleaning
Wheels ................................296
Windshield Wiper Blades ...................285
10
INDEX 329
Climate Control............................169
Clutch Fluid ..............................294
Compact Spare Tire .........................235
Contract, Service ...........................324
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap).............290
Cooling System ............................288
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................289
Coolant Capacity .........................311
Coolant Level ........................288, 291
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................291
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................288
Inspection ..............................291
Points To Remember ......................291
Pressure Cap ............................290
Radiator Cap ...........................290
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......288, 311, 312
Corrosion Protection ........................295
Cruise Light ..............................135
Cupholders...............................109
Customer Assistance ........................322
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights...............90
Daytime Running Lights ......................87
Dealer Service .............................278
Defroster, Rear Window ......................113
Defroster, Windshield ........................69
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ....................91
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................276
Dimmer Switch, Headlight.....................88
Dipsticks
Power Steering ..........................212
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................291
Do Not Disturb ............................194
Door Ajar ................................126
Door Ajar Light............................126
Door Locks................................21
Key Fob Emergency Key ....................19
Door Locks, Automatic .......................22
Door Opener, Garage ........................100
Doors....................................
21
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ..........................209
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........106
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................78
Electronic Brake Control System ................215
Traction Control System ....................217
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..........95
330 INDEX
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............217
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........125
Emergency Brake...........................212
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................270
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................256
Jump Starting ...........................267
Overheating ............................256
Towing ................................270
Emission Control System Maintenance............277
Engine ..................................275
Air Cleaner .............................281
Checking Oil Level .......................279
Compartment ...........................275
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................288, 312
Cooling ...............................288
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................68, 249
Fails To Start ............................201
Flooded, Starting .........................201
Fuel Requirements ....................246, 311
Oil ............................279, 311, 312
Oil Change Interval .......................280
Oil Filler Cap ...........................280
Oil Filter ...............................281
Oil Selection .........................280, 311
Overheating ............................256
Engine Oil Viscosity .....................280, 311
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........55, 271
Ethanol..................................247
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................68, 249
Exhaust System .........................68, 286
Exterior Lighting............................86
Exterior Lights .............................71
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................281
Air Conditioning .........................178
Engine Oil ..........................281,
312
Engine Oil Disposal .......................281
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................256
Turn Signal ........................71, 88, 134
Flash-To-Pass ..............................89
Flooded Engine Starting ......................201
Fluid Capacities............................311
Fluid Leaks ...............................71
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ..............................292, 314
Capacities ..............................311
Clutch Fluid ............................294
10
INDEX 331
Cooling System ..........................288
Engine Oil .............................279
Manual Transmission ..................294, 314
Power Steering .......................212, 314
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ............312
Four-Way Hazard Flasher.....................256
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................270
Fuel ....................................246
Additives ..............................248
Clean Air ..............................247
Ethanol ...............................247
Gasoline ...............................246
Light .................................133
Materials Added .........................248
Methanol ..............................247
Octane Rating ........................246, 312
Requirements ........................246, 311
Tank Capacity ...........................311
Fuses ...................................302
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)............100, 104
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................247
Gasoline (Fuel) ............................246
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................247
Glass Cleaning ............................298
Ground Clearance ..........................254
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ..........................209
Hazard Warning Flasher......................256
Headlights
Automatic ..............................86
Delay ..................................87
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........88
Lights On Reminder .......................87
On With Wipers ........................86, 92
Passing ................................89
Switch .................................86
Time Delay ..............................87
Head Restraints ............................83
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ......
88
Holder, Cup ..............................109
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...............100
Hood Release ..............................84
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid ......................294
Illuminated Entry ...........................16
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................12
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................75
332 INDEX
Instrument Cluster.............118,119,123, 126, 134
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display ..................137
Instrument Panel And Controls.................117
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................299
Interior Appearance Care .....................297
Interior Lights..............................89
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............91
Introduction ................................4
Jump Starting .............................267
KeyFob...................................9
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............13
Remote Battery Replacement .................19
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....19
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......18
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry .................17
Key-In Reminder............................10
Keyless Entry System.......................9,17
Keyless Go.................................9
Key, Replacement ...........................13
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)......................12
Lane Change And Turn Signals .................88
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..........................29
Latches ..................................71
Hood ..................................84
Lead Free Gasoline .........................246
Leaks, Fluid ...............................71
Life Of Tires ..............................238
Liftgate ..................................25
Light Bulbs................................71
Lights .................................71, 86
AirBag ..........................37, 69, 120
Anti-Lock ..............................217
Automatic Headlights ......................86
Brake Warning ..........................121
Bulb Replacement .....................309, 310
Cruise ................................135
Daytime Running .........................87
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...................88
Engine Temperature Warning ................123
Exterior ................................71
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................256
Headlights ..............................86
Headlights On Reminder ....................87
Headlights On With Wipers ...............86,
92
Headlight Switch .........................86
High Beam ..............................88
10
INDEX 333
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................88
Illuminated Entry .........................16
Instrument Cluster ........................86
Intensity Control ..........................89
Interior ................................89
Lights On Reminder .......................87
Low Fuel ..............................133
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........127
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .............90
Park ..................................134
Passing ................................89
Seat Belt Reminder .......................120
Security Alarm ..........................123
Service .............................309, 310
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ..........131, 242
Turn Signal ........................71, 88, 134
Vanity Mirror ............................79
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .123, 134
Loading Vehicle
Tires..................................226
Locks....................................21
Automatic Door ..........................22
Auto Unlock .............................22
Door ..................................21
Power Door .............................21
Low Tire Indicator..........................242
Low Tire Pressure System.....................242
Lubrication, Body ..........................285
Lug Nuts ................................257
Maintenance Free Battery .....................282
Maintenance Procedures......................279
Maintenance Schedule ................315, 316, 317
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .127, 277
Manual, Service............................325
Manual Transmission ....................202, 295
Fluid Level Check .....................294, 314
Lubricant Selection .......................314
Shift Speeds ............................205
Methanol ................................247
Mirrors ..................................75
Electric Remote ...........................78
Outside ................................
78
Rearview ...............................75
Vanity .................................79
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ................6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................242
MOPAR Parts ..........................278, 325
MTBE/ETBE ..............................247
334 INDEX
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................88
Occupant Restraints .........................26
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .................246
Oil, Engine ........................279, 311, 312
Capacity ...............................311
Change Interval .........................280
Checking ..............................279
Dipstick ...............................279
Disposal ...............................281
Filter ..............................281, 312
Filter Disposal ...........................281
Materials Added To .......................280
Pressure Warning Light ....................124
Recommendation .....................280, 311
Viscosity ...........................280, 311
Oil Filter, Change ..........................281
Oil Filter, Selection..........................281
Oil Pressure Light ..........................124
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................276
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink)...............100
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................78
Overheating, Engine ........................256
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........4,325
Paint Care................................295
Panic Alarm ...............................18
Parking Brake .............................212
Parking On Hill............................212
Passing Light ..............................89
Pedals, Adjustable ...........................93
Pets .....................................66
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ........226, 227
Power
Brakes ................................214
Door Locks ..............................21
Mirrors ................................78
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............106
Steering ............................211,212
Windows ...............................23
Power Seats
Forwar
d ................................82
Rearward ...............................82
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.................34
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...............................34
Programming Key Fobs (Remote Keyless Entry)......18
10
INDEX 335
Radial Ply Tires ............................233
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............290
Radio Antenna ............................168
Radio Frequency
General Information ..................12, 14, 20
Radio Operation ...........................168
Radio (Sound Systems) ......................166
Rear Camera...............................98
Rear Liftgate...............................25
Rear Window Defroster ......................113
Rear Window Features .......................113
Reclining Front Seats .........................81
Recreational Towing.........................254
Reformulated Gasoline.......................247
Refrigerant ...............................285
Reminder, Lights On .........................87
Reminder, Seat Belt ..........................28
Remote Keyless Entry ........................17
Key Fob Battery Replacement .................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............13
Remote Battery Replacement .................19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls...........167
Replacement Keys ...........................13
Replacement Parts ..........................278
Replacement Tires ..........................238
Reporting Safety Defects .....................325
Restraint, Head.............................83
Restraints, Child ............................57
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck...................270
Rotation, Tires.............................240
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................69
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................71
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................325
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..........................68
Safety Information, Tire ......................221
Safety Tips ................................68
Schedule, Maintenance ...................315, 316
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............35
Energy Management Feature .................34
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................31
Lap/Shoulder Belts ........................29
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................33
Pr
egnant Women .........................34
Seat Belt Extender .........................33
Seat Belt Pretensioner ......................34
Seat Belt Reminder ........................28
Seat Belt Maintenance .......................299
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................28
336 INDEX
Seat Belts ..............................27, 69
Child Restraint ...........................57
Extender ...............................33
Front Seat .........................27, 29, 31
Inspection ..............................69
Operating Instructions ......................31
Pregnant Women .........................34
Pretensioners ............................34
Rear Seat ...............................29
Reminder ..............................120
Untwisting Procedure ......................33
Seats..................................79, 82
Adjustment ........................79, 80, 82
Reclining ...............................81
Security Alarm ..........................14, 123
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............312
Selection Of Oil ............................280
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................13
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................12
Sentry Key Replacement ......................13
Service Assistance ..........................322
Service Contract ...........................324
Service Manuals ...........................325
Shift Indicator Light.........................205
Shift Speeds ...........................202, 205
Shoulder Belts .............................29
Signals, Turn .........................71, 88, 134
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................239
Spare Tire.............................235, 236
Spark Plugs ..............................312
Speed Control
Resume ................................97
Speed Control (Cruise Control)..................95
Starting .................................200
Emergency (Jump Starting) ..................267
Engine Fails To Start ......................201
Starting And Operating ......................200
Starting Procedures .........................200
Steering
Column Controls .........................88
Power .............................
211,212
Tilt Column .............................93
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................167
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .167
Storage ..................................307
Storage, Vehicle ............................177
Stuck, Freeing .............................270
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag...........39
10
INDEX 337
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ...........176
Tilt Steering Column .........................93
Time Delay, Headlight ........................87
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........226, 227
Tire Markings .............................221
Tires...........................71, 231, 235, 240
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................238
Air Pressure .........................226, 231
Chains ................................239
Compact Spare ..........................235
General Information ...................231, 235
High Speed .............................233
Inflation Pressures ........................232
Life Of Tires ............................238
Load Capacity .......................226, 228
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .............242
Pressure Warning Light ....................131
Quality Grading .........................240
Radial ................................233
Replacement ............................238
Rotation ...............................240
Safety .............................221, 231
Sizes .................................222
Spare Tire ..........................235, 236
Spinning ...............................237
Tread Wear Indicators .....................237
Tire Safety Information.......................221
Tire Service Kit ........258, 259, 260, 262, 263, 265, 266
Towing ..............................254, 270
Disabled Vehicle .........................270
Recreational ............................254
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ............254
Traction .................................209
Traction Control ...........................217
Trailer Towing.............................254
T
ransmission..............................294
Fluid .................................314
Shifting ............................202, 205
Transporting Pets ...........................66
Tread Wear Indicators .......................237
Turn Signals............................88, 134
Uconnect
Operation ..............................166
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV .......................194
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Siri Eyes Free ...........................194
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert .......................189
Uconnect Settings ...........................22
338 INDEX
Uconnect Voice Command ....................180
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................240
Universal Transmitter........................100
Unleaded Gasoline .........................246
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .................33
Upholstery Care ...........................298
Vanity Mirrors .............................79
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...............6
Vehicle Loading............................228
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................6
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ...........14
Vehicle Storage .........................177, 307
Vinyl Trim ...............................298
Viscosity, Engine Oil .....................280, 311
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................180
Warning Flasher, Hazard .....................256
Warnings And Cautions .......................5
Warranty Information .......................324
Washer
Adding Fluid ...........................286
Washers, Windshield......................92, 286
Washing Vehicle ...........................295
Water
Driving Through .........................209
Wheel And Wheel Trim ......................296
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..................296
Window Fogging...........................178
Windows .................................23
Power .................................23
Reset Auto-Up ...........................24
Windshield Defroster.........................69
Windshield Washers ...................90, 92, 286
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................285
Windshield Wipers ..........................90
Wiper Blade Replacement.....................285
Wipers, Intermittent .........................91
10
INDEX 339
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
17JC49-126-AA
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
17ZD-126-AB
Second Edition
17ZD-126-AB
